2016 RAM ProMaster City User Manual

promaster city

OWNER’S MANUAL

2016

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................91

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................143

STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................219

WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................309

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................347

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................401

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................407

INDEX .....................................................................419

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6

䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ............6

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials

that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION 5

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against

operating procedures that could result in a collision,

bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS

against procedures that could result in damage to your

vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,

you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-

ings and Cautions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to

body modifications or special equipment installed by van

conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer

to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such

equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,

stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and

service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-

turer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment in-

stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should

also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions

are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for

assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the

applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:

www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-

mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It

is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical

support. For service issues, contact your authorized

dealer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the

left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through

the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle

6 INTRODUCTION

frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-

mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your

vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12

▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12

▫ Locking Doors With A Key ...............14

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14

䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................14

▫ Replacement Keys .....................15

▫ General Information ....................16

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .16

▫ Rearming Of The System .................17

▫ To Arm The System .....................17

▫ To Disarm The System ...................17

▫ Security System Manual Override ...........17

䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ............18

▫ To Unlock The Doors....................19

▫ To Lock The Doors .....................19

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........19

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........19

▫ General Information ....................20

䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................21

▫ Locking The Doors From The Outside .......22

▫ Unlock The Doors From The Outside ........23

▫ Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The

Vehicle .............................23

▫ Sliding Side Doors......................23

▫ Child Lock System — If Equipped ..........24

▫ Auto Unlock Doors ....................25

䡵 WINDOWS ...........................26

▫ Power Windows — If Equipped ...........26

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................28

䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR ....................29

▫ Opening And Closing From Outside The

Vehicle ..............................29

▫ Opening And Closing From The Inside .......30

▫ Child Lock System .....................30

▫ Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device ..........30

䡵 DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS .............31

▫ Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The

Outside .............................31

▫ Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door

From The Inside .......................32

▫ Opening The Second Swing Door ...........32

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........32

▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............32

▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................34

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........47

▫ Child Restraints .......................61

▫ Transporting Pets ......................85

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....85

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................86

▫ Transporting Passengers..................86

▫ Exhaust Gas .........................87

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle .............................88

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle ..........................90

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical

key, simply push the mechanical key release button.

To order duplicate keys, please contact the authorized

studio that sold you your new vehicle: it has the keys

code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can

be used to order duplicate keys.

Ignition Key Removal

1. Place the shift lever in PARK.

2. Rotate the key to the STOP/OFF/LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

RKE Transmitter with the Key Blade Released

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-

sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, and

remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leav-

ing the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In case

you switch off the vehicle and the transmission is

not in PARK position, a warning message will

appear on the cluster which suggests you to shift

the transmission into PARK position and, then, you

can remove the key within 15 seconds. If 15 sec-

onds expire, you have to rotate the key from

OFF/LOCK position to ON/RUN position and

come back to OFF/LOCK position in order to

remove the key.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

(Continued)

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)

2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)

3 — AVV (START)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

WARNING! (Continued)

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all

the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the

door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn

the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition

and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a

signal to remove the key.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded

electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized

vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-

grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle.

NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also

considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the

ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned

to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a

problem with the electronics.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle

and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-

tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once

a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot

be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the

Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all ve-

hicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of

keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an

authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-

hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for

door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-

dible and visible signals. Every intrusion attempt causes

three continuous alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for

30 seconds. For 26 seconds, the horn will sound, and the

turn signal lights will flash. For four seconds, it will

pause. After a maximum of 10 alarm cycles, only the turn

signal lights will flash until the next alarm activation.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Rearming Of The System

If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will rearm itself after processing all the alarm

cycles related to the intrusion attempt. If the condition

which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will

ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors

and ignition.

To Arm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the

doors. If a door or the hood is not properly shut, the

alarm system will exclude the related door from protec-

tion.

To Disarm The System

Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door and disarm

the system.

To exit the alarming mode, push the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button and open the door.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle

and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from

distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a

hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The

RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the

vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with

metal objects.

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

1 – Mechanical Key Release Button

2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button

3 – Lock Button

4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock The Doors

CARGO Vehicle

Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-

ter to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the

CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter to unlock

the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors).

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the

unlock signal.

Passenger Vehicle

Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-

ter to unlock all doors. Push and release the CARGO

UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter to unlock the cargo

doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge

the unlock signal.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and

the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing” for further information.

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,

contact your authorized dealer for details.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-

ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the

mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-

cated on the side of the Key Fob.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob

using a small screwdriver.

3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the

battery observing its polarity.

4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the

screw to lock it into place.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Key Fob Screw Location

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS

The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the

vehicle by using the door handle.

• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle.

• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.

Power Door Locks

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

Locking The Doors From The Outside

Locking with an RKE transmitter

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and

the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Locking with the RKE key blade

RKE Transmitter

1 – Mechanical Key Release Button

2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button

3 – Lock Button

4 – Cargo Unlock Button

RKE Key Blade Released

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1 shown

above) to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade

into the doors exterior lock cylinder and turn the key

clockwise to lock the front door.

Unlock The Doors From The Outside

Unlocking with an RKE transmitter

On the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK

button on RKE transmitter to unlock all doors. On the

Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on

RKE transmitter to unlock the front two doors. Push and

release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter

once to unlock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors

and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to

acknowledge the unlock signal.

Unlocking with the RKE key blade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1) to

expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the

driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key

counterclockwise to unlock the all doors.

Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The

Vehicle

Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers

door panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from

inside the vehicle.

Sliding Side Doors

Unlocking with an RKE transmitter

Push and release the CARGO UNLOCK button on the

RKE transmitter to unlock the sliding side doors. To open

one of the sliding side doors, pull the handle out from the

bottom, then slide the door towards the rear of the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

vehicle until it locks into place and cannot go any further.

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the

unlock signal.

Unlocking with the RKE key blade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the

RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver

exterior door lock cylinder and turn the key counter-

clockwise to unlock all doors.

Closing and locking from outside

Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of

the vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full

closed position, reverse either of the unlocking modes

above to lock the sliding side doors.

Child Lock System — If Equipped

This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened

from the inside.

It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:

Child Lock System

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door

Lock System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and

rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

The device remains engaged even if the doors are un-

locked remotely.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged (locked).

NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the

Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually

raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll

down the window, and open the door using the outside

door handle.

Auto Unlock Doors

This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is

open.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

WINDOWS

Power Windows — If Equipped

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN

switches that give you fingertip control of all power

windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on

the front passenger door for passenger window control.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the

power windows to operate for up to three minutes after

the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when

either front door is opened.

The window opening mechanism is fitted with a security

system (if equipped) that can detect the presence of an

obstacle whilst the window is closing; when this hap-

pens, the system activates and the movement of the glass

is immediately reversed.

If the presence of an object is detected and the system is

activated, it may be necessary to perform the reset

procedure by fully opening the windows.

Power Window Switch Panel

1 – Rear Window Control Buttons – If Equipped

2 – Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons

3 – Passenger(s) Window Lock Button

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

Auto-Down Feature

The front window switches are equipped with an Auto-

Down feature. Push the window switch for a short period

of time, release, and the window will go down automati-

cally.

To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up on the

window switch briefly and release.

NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up

to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay

setting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.

Opening either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this

feature.

Auto-Up Feature

Lift the window switch to the detent for half a second,

release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to

the detent for less than half a second and release it when

you want the window to stop.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Power Windows System Initialization

The power windows may be reset if any of the following

occurs:

• On the front doors

• Fuse or battery are disconnected.

• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window

is moving.

• 20 window movements without ever closing the

window.

• On the rear doors (in addition to the condition for the

front doors)

• One door opening movement with the window

moving, without ever closing the door.

Proceed as follows for initialization:

1. Completely close the driver’s door window, keeping

the operating button pushed for at least five seconds

after the (upper) end of travel position.

2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger’s side door

button and on the buttons of rear doors.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down in certain open or partially open posi-

tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.

If the buffeting occurs open the front windows together

to minimize the buffeting.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SLIDING SIDE DOOR

On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a

spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any

further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will

go; to unlock it, pull forward firmly.

Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle

Opening/Unlocking with an RKE transmitter

In the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK

button on RKE transmitter to unlock all doors. In the

Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on

RKE transmitter to unlock the front two doors. Push and

release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter

once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side lateral

sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will

flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

Unlocking with the RKE key blade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the

RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door

exterior lock cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise

to unlock all doors.

Closing/Locking with an RKE transmitter

Push and release the LOCK button on RKE transmitter to

lock all doors. Push and release the CARGO LOCK

button on RKE transmitter once to lock the cargo area

(side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal

lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge

the lock signal.

Locking with the RKE key blade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the

RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door

exterior lock cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock

all doors.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

Opening And Closing From The Inside

Opening:

Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door,

then pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear

of the vehicle until it can go no further.

Closing:

Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door

and then push it towards the front of the vehicle.

Child Lock System

This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened

from the inside.

It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:

• Position 1 – engaged (door locked)

• Position 2 – disengaged (door can be opened from

inside)

The device remains engaged even if the doors are un-

locked remotely.

Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device

The sliding side doors are provided with a device for

locking all the doors using the lock in case of a power

fault.

The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors

open as follows:

• Position 1– device not engaged (doors released)

• Position 2 – device engaged (fit the metal insert of the

ignition key in its seat and rotate clockwise), door

locked

The device is released and thus the doors can be opened

as follows:

If the power is restored:

• By remote control.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key

pawl.

If the power is not restored:

• Opening the driver side door by key pawl and the

other doors (passenger’s side and sliding side door)

pulling the inner handle.

If the child lock was engaged and the previously de-

scribed locking procedure was carried out, operating the

internal handle will not open the door but will only

realign the door lock knob. To open the door, the outside

handle must be pulled. The door central locking/

unlocking button is not disabled by the engagement of

the emergency lock.

DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS

The rear double swing doors are fitted with a link system

that stops them when they have opened to an angle of

approximately 90 degrees.

To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the

locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously

open the doors.

Using the key pawl on the door, you can do the follow-

ing:

• For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors:

centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding side

doors + rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all

the doors.

• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/

locking.

Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The

Outside

To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the

CARGO UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless (RKE)

transmitter and then pull the exterior handle to the left.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

To close the door, turn the key in the lock or push the lock

button on the Remote Keyless (RKE) transmitter.

Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door

From The Inside

From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release

mechanism located on the left rear trim panel.

Opening The Second Swing Door

After having opened the first door, pull the handle

located on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should

be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-

dren who do not use child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your

vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space

between occupants and the door and occupants could

be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert) — If Equipped

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle

their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-

ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or

MAR/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first

turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a

chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or

MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will

turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat

belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger

seat is unoccupied.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-

buckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is

not active when the outboard front passenger seat is

unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence

has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain

on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,

the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat

belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front

passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered

when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front

passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if

equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers

that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly

stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-

vating BeltAlert.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver

or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the

driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are

buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

•

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect

the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

Positioning The Lap Belt

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to

create a fold that begins immediately above the latch

plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze

the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it

up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Anchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

Adjustable Anchorage

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an

accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child

if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen

and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the

shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under

the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

Commercial Vehicle

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the

seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate

the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a

seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

(Continued)

Passenger Vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

WARNING! (Continued)

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger

Knee Air Bag

3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air

Bag

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the air bags and you could be injured

because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are

designed to open only when the air bags are

inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

WARNING! (Continued)

some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-

ways wear your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the

steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by

working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and

Advanced Front Air Bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental

Side Air Bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or AIRBAG

label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury

reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body

structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the

occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high

speed and with such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children

are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other

injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in

certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction

potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

headliner out of the way and covers the window. The

SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if

they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children

are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain side impact events.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!

•

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deployment path

are located should remain free from any obstruc-

tions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any

accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the

vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment

of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is

appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.

The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the

appropriate response to impact events. The system is

calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side

of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag

occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags

deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left

Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the

right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a

good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should

have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-

tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you have any

blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air

bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the

skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

(Continued)

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light

button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the

intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functions after an event, the ignition switch must be

changed from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/

RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the

vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank

before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection

in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-

ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and

interconnecting wiring associated with air bag

system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the

ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the

air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to

the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,

the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC

detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns

on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or

continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the

light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags

to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in

the on position, and stays on after you start the

vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING! (Continued)

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child

restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to

www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s

website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/

eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-

index-53.htm

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Tod-

dlers

Children who are two years old or younger

and who have not reached the height or

weight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight

limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-

point Harness, facing forward in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their

forward-facing child restraint, but are too

small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle

seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the ve-

hicle

Children Too

Large for Child

Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

out-grown the height or weight limit of

their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of

the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they

reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats

often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible

child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown

their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-

facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for

as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height

allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use

a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child

correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)

Restraint System (Passenger Vehicle)

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Passenger Vehicle)

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Child Restraint LATCH Positions

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the LATCH an-

chorage system to attach the child

restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system

until the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is

65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt

and tether anchor instead of the

LATCH system once the combined

weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and

the seat belt be used together to

attach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you

use the LATCH anchorage system

to attach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in the

center position using the inner

LATCH lower anchorages?

No Use the seat belt and tether anchor

to install a child seat in the center

seating position.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can two child restraints be at-

tached using a common lower

LATCH anchorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage

with two or more child restraints.

If the center position does not have

dedicated LATCH lower anchor-

ages, use the seat belt to install a

child seat in the center position

next to a child seat using the

LATCH anchorages in an outboard

position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back

of the front passenger seat if the

child restraint manufacturer also

allows contact. See your child re-

straint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes Second row all positions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Locating LATCH Anchorages (Passenger Vehicle)

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-

bols on the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the

gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Locating Tether Anchorages (Passenger Vehicle)

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the

seat.

LATCH Anchorages

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH:

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-

tion using the LATCH system. This position is not

approved for installing child seats using the

LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt

and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center

seating position.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing

The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”

for typical installation instructions.

Tether Anchorage Locations

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not

all child restraint systems will be installed as described

here.

To install a LATCH-compatible Child Restraint:

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”

to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

Belt (Passenger Vehicle)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,

refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-

der “Occupant Restraints.”

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Passenger Vehicle

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchor

with the seat belt to attach a for-

ward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when

using the seat belt to install a for-

ward facing child restraint, up to

the recommended weight limit of

the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passen-

ger seat and the child restraint is

allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes Second Row: The head restraints

may be removed from all positions.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a

seating position with an ALR re-

tractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing

out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage — Passenger Wagon Only:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat

to any location in front of the car seat, including the

seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the

section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward to provide

better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the

child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one

is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head

restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Strap Mounting

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Installing Child Restraints in Commercial Vehicles

This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a

family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children

in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing

child restraints in this vehicle. If you must carry a child in

a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat

should be moved to the full rearward position and the

child must be in a proper restraint system based on its

age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to

secure the child restraint using the seat belt and tether

anchorage.

WARNING!

Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured

in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger

Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag may

deploy causing severe injury or death to infants

riding in rear-facing infant restraints.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

Belt (Commercial Vehicle)

The seat belt in the passenger seating position is

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion

of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can

be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,

refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-

der “Occupant Restraints.”

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Commercial

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat webbing

retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the

seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top

Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether

anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)

This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage

located behind the front passenger seatback, near the

floor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint,

always secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.

1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether

anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to

provide better access to the tether anchorage.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head re-

straints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Strap Installation

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-

hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle.”

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

•

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set

at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light

will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch

is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,

have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning

Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault

is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-

able.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-

ing with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-

jects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if

equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause

should be located and corrected immediately.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 MIRRORS .............................94

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....94

▫ Outside Mirrors .......................94

▫ Manual Folding Door Mirrors .............95

▫ Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If

Equipped ............................96

▫ Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped .......96

▫ Sun Visors ...........................97

䡵 SEATS ...............................98

▫ Manual Seat Adjustments.................98

▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped ..........101

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............102

▫ Head Restraints ......................103

䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........108

䡵 LIGHTS .............................110

▫ Multifunction Lever ...................110

▫ Headlights ..........................111

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....111

▫ High Beams..........................111

▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................112

▫ Parking Lights .......................112

▫ Turn Signals .........................112

▫ Lane Change Assist ....................112

▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........112

▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........113

▫ Map/Dome/Lights ....................113

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......114

▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........115

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............117

䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .118

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........119

▫ To Activate ..........................120

▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................120

▫ To Deactivate ........................120

▫ To Resume Speed .....................120

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............121

▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............122

䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED .........................123

▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .........123

▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts ..........124

▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure

Indications ..........................126

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System .............................126

▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage

Precautions ..........................126

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................128

䡵 POWER OUTLETS .....................130

䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................134

䡵 CUPHOLDER .........................134

䡵 STORAGE ............................134

▫ Glove Compartment ...................134

▫ Dash Storage ........................135

▫ Overhead Console Storage ...............136

䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................136

▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .................136

▫ Rear Cargo Lights .....................138

▫ Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped . . . .139

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............140

▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ......140

䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .....141

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is

a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-

shield. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,

and right for various drivers. The mirror should be

adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced

by moving the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while the small control under the

mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight

overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side

mirror.

Manual Folding Door Mirrors

The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be

folded rearward to help avoid damage.

CAUTION!

It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full

rearward position to resist damage when entering a

car wash or a narrow location.

Folding Mirrors

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped

From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to

adjust the mirror.

Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped

The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag

trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a

mirror, turn the control knob toward the left or right

mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the

direction you want the mirror to move. When you are

finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the

center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving a

mirror.

Manual Mirror Control Lever

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sun Visors

The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the

headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be

rotated downward or up against the door glass. Your

vehicle may be equipped with courtesy mirror located on

the passenger sun visor.

Power Mirror Controls

1 — Driver Mirror Select Position

2 — Neutral Position

3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position

4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

“Slide-On-Rod” Of Sun Visor

To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate

the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is

parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with

your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the

desired position.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Manual Seat Adjustments

The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted

forward and rearward and if equipped may be reclined

and the height and lumbar can be adjusted.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

(Continued)

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

Seat Adjustments

1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar

2 — Height Adjustment Lever

3 — Recliner Knob

4 — Lumbar Knob

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

Forward And Rearward Adjustment

The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.

Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-

ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired

position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and

rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters

have latched.

Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The height adjusting lever is located on the center

outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the

front lever to adjust the front of the seat up or down.

Recliner Adjustment — If Equipped

The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without

leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright

position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the

seatback is in the upright position.

Lumbar Support — If Equipped

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the

amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is

located on the rear upper outboard side of the seatback.

Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to

decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could

cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be

adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust

the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use

the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be

folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.

1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat),

and lift it upward until the seatback releases.

2. Slowly fold down the seatback.

3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the

lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for

extended cargo space.

Seatback Release Lever

Seat Release Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

4. Reverse order for original setting.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats

may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions

and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are

located on the lower outboard side of the seat.

Push the button once to turn on the heated seats. The

LED on the button turns on when the heated seat is on.

Push the button a second time to shut the heating

elements off.

Extended Cargo Space

Heated Seat Control Button

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• This features is allowed only with ignition key at MAR

(ACC/ON/RUN) position.

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within

two to five minutes.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

WARNING! (Continued)

never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or

death in the event of a collision.

Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, push the adjustment button,

located on the base of the head restraint, pull upward on

the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the

adjustment button, located on the base of the head

restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go

then push the release button and the adjustment button

at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint

up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint

posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the

head restraint to the appropriate height.

Front Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-

sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or

death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely

stow removed head restraints in a location outside

the occupant compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow

the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-

ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Rear Head Restraints

The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing

the release buttons, located at the base of the head

restraint and pull upward on the whole assembly.

To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts

into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the

appropriate height.

WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision

or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to

occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-

moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-

pant compartment.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To

raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment

button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull

upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,

push and hold the adjustment button, and push down-

ward on the head restraint till the desired height is

reached.

To remove the head restraint, push the release button and

adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole

assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the

headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while

pushing the release button and adjustment button. Then

adjust it to the appropriate height.

Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

re-installation instructions above prior to operating

the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Center Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument

panel and in front of the driver’s door.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the

opening beneath the center of the hood and push up

the safety latch lever to release it, before raising the

hood.

Hood Release Lever

Hood Safety Latch Lever Location

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood

slot to secure the hood in the open position.

CAUTION!

Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in close

position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)

and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully

(Continued)

Hood Prop Rod

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

CAUTION! (Continued)

closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless

hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the

steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,

high beams, parking lights, passing light and turn sig-

nals.

NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the

ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Multifunction Lever

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-

ward to the first detent for headlight operation.

NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime

Running Lights will be deactivated.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the

end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.

NOTE:

• The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with

DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be ON

or OFF through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen

radio, this feature can be programmed through the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

High Beams

With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc-

tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on

the high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in

the cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the

multifunction lever a second time to switch the head-

lights back to low beam.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is

released.

Parking Lights

To turn on the parking lights, remove the key

or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and

turn on the headlights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or

there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five

times then automatically turn off.

Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.

Activation

Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK

position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the

steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by

30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to

a maximum of 210 seconds.

Deactivation

Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel

and hold it for more than two seconds.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog light switch is located on the center

stack of the instrument panel, just below the

radio. Push the switch once to turn the front

fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the

front fog lights off.

Map/Dome/Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the

overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the

corresponding switch.

Left Switch

• Push the left switch to the left to turn OFF the auto

dome lights. The dome lights will not automatically

turn on when a door is opened.

• Push the left switch to the right to turn ON the dome

lights.

Right Switch

• Push the right switch to the left to turn ON the left

map light.

• Push the right switch to the right to turn ON the right

map light.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the

right side of the steering column.

NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-

ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Map/Dome Lights

1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map

2 — Dome 4 — Right Map

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Windshield Wiper Operation

There are five different modes of operation for the front

windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be

moved in several positions to access these modes.

Windshield Wiper Off

This is the normal position of the wiper lever.

Intermittent Speed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first

detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent

speed. When the vehicle’s speed increases, the time

between the wipes will decrease.

Low Speed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second

detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.

Windshield Wiper Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

High Speed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third

detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.

Manual High Speed/Mist

Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers

will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray

from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until

the lever is released. When the lever is released, the

wipers will return to the off position and automatically

shut off.

Front Windshield Washer Operation

Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the

steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will

activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is

released.

CAUTION!

• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the

windshield wipers may result if the wiper control

is left in any position other than off.

• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch

and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-

tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper

switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the

windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur

when the vehicle is restarted.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

off position. If the windshield wiper control is

turned off and the blades cannot return to the off

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

Rear Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to

operate the rear window wiper as follows:

• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is

not operating.

• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front

window wiper) when the front window wiper is

operating.

• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.

With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,

rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.

Rear Windshield Washer Operation

Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the

rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever

pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the

rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield

wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as

described for the windshield wipers.

The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is

released.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control

handle is located on the steering column, below the turn

signal lever.

To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle

down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering

wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or

shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel

outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering

column in position, pull the control handle up until fully

engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious injury or

death.

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons is located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the ON/OFF

button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in

the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system

off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle

has reached the desired speed greater than 25 mph, push

the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and

the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button,

or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will

deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the

set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or

turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed

memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph

(160 km/h).

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The speed increment is dependant on the chosen speed

unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a

1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The speed decrement is dependant on the chosen speed

unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides an

audible indication of the distance between the rear

fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up,

e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense

System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system

and recommendations.

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automatically acti-

vated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As

the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle de-

creases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.

Interaction With Trailer Towing

The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated

when a trailer equipped by MOPAR is hitched to the

vehicle. The system will be automatically activated as

soon as the trailer is removed. If it does not happen,

turning the key ignition switch to OFF and then to ON

again would be needed. In case of a non MOPAR trailer

hitches are mounted the sensor deactivation cannot be

guaranteed.

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors

The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors, located in

the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the

vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The

sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,

from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm)

from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in

(60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,

depending on the location, type and orientation of the

obstacle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.

The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-

sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would

clear the underside of the vehicle during the parking

maneuver.

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts

If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear

is engaged, an audible alert is activated.

The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver

that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses

between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-

tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-

sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A

continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12

inches (30 cm) away.

Rear Park Assist Sensors Location

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION

Obstacle

Distance

An obstacle is present within the

sensors’ field of view

Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)

• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the

distance decreases.

• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).

• Adjustable volume level programmable through per-

sonal settings in the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel”.

Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)

• Icon appears on display.

• Message is displayed on multifunction display

(where provided).

While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not

muted.

The audible signal is turned off immediately if the

distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the

distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this

condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is

turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during

maneuvers parallel to walls).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications

A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors

or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engage-

ment, by the instrument panel warning icon.

The warning icon is illuminated and a message

is displayed on the multifunction display (if

equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-

scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the

ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-

cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.

Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor

is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display

shall indicate that the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system

is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure

condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system

must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically.

Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System

Clean the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors with water,

car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard

cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping

the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4

inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke

the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage

Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the

rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist

system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking

care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must

not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or

debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not

working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might

not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the fascia/bumper.

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be

placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can

result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a

sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be

displayed in the instrument cluster.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense. Always check carefully

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

WARNING! (Continued)

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball

assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter

out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in

sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be

performed only by an authorized dealer.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen

image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever

the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be

displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-

tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of

the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle

above the rear License plate.

The Camera Delay setting can be set to ON/OFF on the

rear camera settings menu. When the vehicle is shifted

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

out of REVERSE and the Camera Delay is turned OFF, the

rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio

screen appears on display again.

When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, with

the delay camera activated ON in the menu screen, the

camera image will continue to be displayed up to 10

seconds, unless the speed of the vehicle is greater than

8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK position or

the ignition key is in the OFF position.

The display of the camera image can be enabled or

disabled through the rear camera setting menu item

(Camera ON/OFF).

When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width

of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help

indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The

following table shows the approximate distances for each

zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

•

To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable

to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with

water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

POWER OUTLETS

Passenger Compartment Power Outlets

The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the

center console, and both operate with the ignition key in

the MAR (ON/RUN) position.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Load Compartment Power Outlet

The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the

left side of the rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be

used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories and

recharging communications devices.

CAUTION!

Do not connect devices with power higher than 180W

to the outlet. Using unsuitable adaptors may damage

the outlet.

Passenger Compartment Power Outlets Load Compartment Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #85 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet 12V

2 — #86 Fuse 30A Green IP Power Outlet 12V

Interior Fuse Panel Power Outlet Fuse Location

1 — #05 Fuse 15A Blue Second IP Power Outlet 12V

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-

tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED

A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.

Push the cigar lighter button to activate the cigar lighter

when the ignition key is in the MAR (ON/RUN) posi-

tion.

After a few seconds the button returns to its initial

position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.

NOTE: Always check that the cigar lighter has turned

itself off.

WARNING!

The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it care-

fully and make sure children don’t touch it: risk of

fire and/or burning.

CUPHOLDER

A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center

console.

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side

of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to

open the glove compartment.

NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with

a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the

emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key

into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn

the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the

reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dash Storage

The dash storage is located on the right side of the

instrument panel above the glove compartment.

Glove Compartment Release Handle

Dash Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Overhead Console Storage

There is additional shelf storage above the front sun

visors.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks (if

equipped) fixed to the floor.

Overhead Console Storage Location

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats

and use seat belts.

• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,

a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to

come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use

only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can

change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-

dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal

injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:

• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits

described on the label attached to the left door or

left door center pillar.

•

Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.

(Continued)

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

WARNING! (Continued)

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of

the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

accident.

Rear Cargo Lights

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear cargo light that

can be set to three different positions (On/Left Position,

Auto/Center Position, On/Right Position). Using the

interior light lens, push the lens to the right or left from

its center position and the light is turned on. Leave the

lens in the center position, and the light is turned on and

off when the doors are opened or closed.

The light above the sliding door or above the second row

seats depending on model can be set to three different

positions (Off/Left Position, Auto/Center Position, On/

Right Position). Using the interior light lens, push the

lens to the right from its center position and the light is

turned on. Push the lens to the left and the light is turned

off. Leave the lens in the center position, and the light is

turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The light will turn off automatically after 15

minutes.

Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped

The cargo compartment light comes on automatically

when the swing doors are opened and turns off when the

doors are closed.

Rear Cargo Light

Cargo Compartment Light

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped

The rear window defroster button is located in the

center of the instrument panel, below the radio.

Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster

and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-

tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window

defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually

shut the defroster off, push the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear

window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the

weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The

load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be

uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized

dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built

specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.

The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying

capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo

inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not

exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at

the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight

turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the

MOPAR crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the de-

sired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack

frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,

retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into

position.

NOTE:

• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not

in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxi-

mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction

can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar

forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).

• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite

radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience in-

terruption of satellite radio reception. For improved

satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear cross-

bar over the satellite radio antenna.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

CAUTION!

• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do

not carry any loads on the roof rack without the

crossbars installed. The load should be secured and

placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the

roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,

place a blanket or some other protection between

the load and the roof surface.

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do

not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of

150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as

evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-

ately.

• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such

as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large

frontal area should be secured to both the front and

rear of the vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully

when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof

rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby

truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.

This is especially true on large flat loads and may

result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your

vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the

vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-

sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack

cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........146

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................147

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......149

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............150

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............162

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............173

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............175

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) ..............................176

▫ Speed Beep ..........................179

▫ Trip B Data ..........................180

▫ SetTime............................180

▫ Set Date ............................181

▫ Autoclose ...........................182

▫ Setting The Units ......................182

▫ Language ...........................184

▫ Buzzer Volume .......................184

▫ Seat Belt Buzzer Volume.................184

▫ Service .............................185

▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL)............185

▫ Exit Menu...........................186

▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........186

▫ Trip Computer .......................187

▫ Trip Button ..........................187

▫ Trip Functions .......................188

▫ Values Displayed ......................188

䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................189

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................191

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................193

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............193

▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings.............................193

䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................201

䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .201

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................202

▫ Radio Operation ......................203

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .204

▫ General Information ...................204

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................205

▫ Manual Climate Controls ................205

䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

— IF EQUIPPED .......................210

▫ Introducing Uconnect...................210

▫ Get Started ..........................210

▫ Radio ..............................212

▫ Basic Voice Commands..................213

144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Media..............................214

▫ Phone..............................215

▫ Voice Text Reply ......................216

▫ Additional Information .................216

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls

2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 8 — Radio 14 — USB Charger/AUX

3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 15 — Driver Air Bag

4— Horn 10 — Lower Dash Storage 16 — Uconnect Phone Buttons

5— Electronic Speed Control Switches 11 — Glove compartment 17 — Shift Lever

6— Multifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper, Trip Computer) 12 — Switch Bank

146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

EVIC Instrument Cluster

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147

1. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed

2. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position

3. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-

tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the

upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on

in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-

sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and precautionary and as such

must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative

to the information contained in the Owner Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the

event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Some

telltales are optional and may not appear.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and

the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after

reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,a

continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is

expired, whichever come first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system

is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-

perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-

vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-

mation.

150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Oil Level Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Oil Level Warning Light

This warning light appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum rec-

ommended value. Restore the correct engine oil level or contact your authorized dealer for ser-

vice.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-

pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and

completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should

turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-

able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and

you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your

vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a

chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-

buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will

sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153

Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer

to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155

Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase

engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is

experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an

authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies.”

156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Door Open Indicator Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Door Open Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with

severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-

voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at

the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system

malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may

be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-

cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and

stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-

come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer

immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-

formation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Low Fuel Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Fuel Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2–6 gal (9–11 L) this light will turn on, and re-

main on until fuel is added.

Generic Warning Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Generic Warning Indicator Light

The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Engine

Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Fail-

ure.

162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Glow Plug Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Glow Plug Indicator Light

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will in-

hibit engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than

–35° C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been

used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when

the ambient temperature is below -32° C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair

immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be

checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165

CAUTION! (Continued)

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Security Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Indicator Light

If during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes

on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is

still locked, try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized

dealer if you still cannot start the engine.

If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is run-

ning a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate

the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-

eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not

require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to

immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-

viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169

Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Rear Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.

170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-

hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h),

see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was

turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused

the ESC activation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Transmission Fault Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Fault Warning Light

This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a

transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the

engine.

172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Tell-

tale Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn

signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when

the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

NOTE:

•

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either

turn signal on.

•

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.

Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control

lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to

switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high

beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful

information by pushing the switches mounted on the

instrument panel. The EVIC Menu items consists of the

following:

• Speed Beep

• Trip B Data

• Set Time

• Set Date

• Autoclose

• Units

• Language

• Buzzer Volume

• Seat Belt Buzzer

• Service

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Daylights

• Exit Menu

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the instru-

ment panel to the right of the steering column:

NOTE: If equipped with Uconnect(R) 5.0/5.0N radio,

some customer programmable features will display and

managed by the Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N system. Refer to

the radio supplement for further Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N

information.

• MENU Button

Push and HOLD the MENU button for a time longer than

1 second to access/select the information screens or

submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the

MENU button for two seconds to reset displayed/

selected features that can be reset.

EVIC Control Buttons

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu and

submenus.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu and

submenus.

Dimmer:

With headlights on and without entering in the menu,

push the UP

or DOWN arrow button to increase

or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel,

graphics and command buttons.

Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display

the first submenu option.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button (by single pushes) to scroll through all the

submenu options.

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select

the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-

evant setup menu.

4. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button (by single pushes) to select the new setting

for this submenu option.

5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the

new setting and go back to the previously selected

submenu option.

6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main

menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).

178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Speed Beep

This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or km/h);

the driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded.

To set the desired speed limit:

1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will show

the wording (SPEED) and the unit (MPH) or (km/h)

previously set.

2. If the function is on, push and release the UP

DOWN

arrow button to select the required

speed limit and then push MENU to confirm.

NOTE: The speed may be set in the range from 20 to 125

MPH (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previously

chosen unit (see “Setting The Unit”) described below.

The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time

theUP

or DOWN arrow button is pushed. Hold

down the UP

or DOWN arrow button to auto-

matically increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-

plete the adjustment when you approach the desired

value.

Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

To cancel the setting:

1. Briefly push the MENU button. “ON” will flash in the

display.

2. Push the DOWN

arrow button. “OFF” will flash

in the display

3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

Trip B Data

This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate

(Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip).

Refer to ⬙Trip Computer⬙ in this section for further

information.

To switch the function On/Off:

1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will flash

On or Off according to the previous setting.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

Set Time

With this function, it is possible to set the time through

two submenus: ⬙Time⬙ and ⬙Mode⬙.

To set the time:

1. Push the MENU button; the display will show the two

submenus “Time” and “Mode”.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to switch between the two submenus.

3. Select the required option and then push MENU.

4. If selecting the “Time” submenu, briefly push MENU,

the “hours” will flash on the display.

5. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

6. Push the MENU button; the “minutes” will flash on

the display.

7. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each

time theUP

or DOWN arrow button is pushed.

Hold down the button to increase/decrease the setting

rapidly and automatically. Complete the adjustment

when you approach the desired value.

When you select “Mode”, pushing the MENU button

makes the mode flash on the display.

1. Push UP

or DOWN arrow button to select

⬙24h⬙ or ⬙12h⬙.

2. When you have made the required settings, push the

MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu

screen or hold the button down to go back to the main

menu screen without saving.

3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the

standard screen or to the main menu according to

where you are in the menu.

Set Date

With this function, it is possible to set the date.

To adjust the date:

1. Push the MENU button; the “year” will flash on the

display.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

3. Push the MENU button; the “month” will flash on the

display.

4. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

5. Push the MENU button; the “day” will flash on the

display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181

6. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each

time the UP

or DOWN arrow button is pushed.

Hold down the UP or DOWN arrow button to

increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automati-

cally. Complete the adjustment when you approach

the desired value.

Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

Autoclose

When activated (On), this function locks the doors auto-

matically when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph

(20 km/h).

To activate or deactivate this function:

1. Push the MENU button briefly to display a submenu.

2. Push the MENU button briefly to make the display

flash On or Off according to the previous setting

3. Push the UP

or DOWN arrow button to

select.

4. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the sub-

menu screen or hold the button down to return to the

main menu screen without saving.

5. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the

standard screen or to the main menu according to

where you are in the menu.

Setting The Units

With this function, it is possible to set the unit of

measurement in three submenus: “Distance”, “Con-

sumption” and “Temperature”.

182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To set the required unit of measurement:

1. Push the MENU button to display the three sub-

menus.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to navigate through the three submenus.

3. Select the required option and then push the MENU

button.

4. If selecting the ⬙Distance⬙ submenu, briefly push the

MENU button and the display will show “mi” or ⬙km⬙

depending on the previous setting.

5. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

When you select the “Consumption” submenu: briefly

pushing the MENU button makes “mpg” or “km/l”

appear on the display, depending on the previous setting.

1. If the set distance unit of measurement is ⬙mi⬙ (km) the

fuel consumption unit will be displayed in ⬙mpg⬙

(km/l or l/100 km).

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

When you select the ⬙Temperature⬙ submenu: briefly

pushing the MENU button the display will show ⬙°C⬙ or

⬙°F⬙ depending on the previous setting.

1. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

2. When you have made the required settings, push the

MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu

screen or hold the MENU button down to go back to

the main menu screen without saving.

3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the

standard screen or to the main menu according to

where you are in the menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

Language

Display messages can be shown in different languages.

To set the desired language, proceed as follows:

1. Push the MENU button, the previously set language

will flash on the display.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen

or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

Buzzer Volume

With this function, the volume of the acoustic signal

which accompanies the display of failure/warning can

be adjusted according to 8 levels.

To set the desired volume:

1. Push the MENU button, the previously set volume

level will flash on the display.

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen

or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

Seat Belt Buzzer Volume

With this function the volume of the acoustic signal

which accompanies the display of failure/warning can

be adjusted accordingly.

To set the desired volume:

1. Push the MENU button, the previously set volume

level will flash on the display.

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to adjust.

3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen

or hold the MENU button down to return to the

standard screen without storing.

Service

Using this function you can display information about

the mileage intervals for vehicle servicing.

To consult the information:

1. Push the MENU button, which makes the display

show the service interval in mi or km according to the

previous setting.

2. Push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen

or hold the MENU button down to go back to the

standard screen.

NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle

maintenance at fixed intervals. Refer to “Maintenance

Schedules” for further information.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

With this function it is possible to turn the daytime

running lights on and off.

To activate or deactivate this function:

1. Push the MENU button to display a submenu.

2. Push the MENU button to make the display flash On

or Off according to the previous setting.

3. Push and release the UP

or DOWN arrow

button to select.

4. Push the MENU button to return to the submenu

screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the

main menu screen without saving.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

5. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the

standard screen or to the main menu according to

where you are in the menu.

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings

listed in the menu screen.

1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return the

display to the standard screen without storing.

2. Push the DOWN

arrow button to return to the

first menu item on the display.

Change Engine Oil Indicator System

Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will

display in the EVIC display. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent

upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and

release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-

tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),

refer to the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not

start the engine).

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,

within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trip Computer

The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It

features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-

tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,

average speed, and travel time).

Trip Button

The TRIP button, located on the right steering column

stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously

described values.

• A short button push displays the different values.

• A long button push resets the system and then starts a

new trip.

New Trip

To reset:

• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system

manually.

• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or

kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59

(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-

matically.

• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the

system.

NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of

the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-

mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be

reset.

Start Of Trip Procedure

With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for

over one second to reset.

Exit Trip

To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have

been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than

one second.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to

the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-

mately one second) to go back to the main screen without

storing settings.

Trip Functions

Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new

trip).

“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Range

• Trip distance A

• Average Economy A

• Instantaneous Economy

• Average speed A

• Travel time A (driving time)

• Reset Trip A

“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Trip distance B

• Average Economy B

• Average speed B

• Travel time B (driving time)

• Reset Trip B

NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip

B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Economy” can-

not be reset. “Reset Trip A” and “Reset Trip B” may be

present.

Values Displayed

Range

This indicates the distance which may be traveled with

the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

conditions will not change. The message “----” will

appear on the display in the following cases:

• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).

• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine

running.

NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving

style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,

etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire

pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the

above notes.

Distance Traveled

This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.

Average Economy

This value shows the approximate average consumption

since the last reset.

Instantaneous Economy

This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-

stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the

display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.

Average Speed

This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-

tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.

Travel Time

This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be

equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These

networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-

mation. This information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security

features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful

access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.

Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,

evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar

to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require

software updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of

unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-

tems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your

vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent

version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is

installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are

breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be im-

paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that

may result in an accident involving serious injury

or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media

of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-

cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to

be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-

havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized

dealer immediately.

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding

software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize

the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners

should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-

update to learn about available Uconnect software

updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-

not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept

information and private communications without your

consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-

agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle”.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on

the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on

the center of the instrument panel that allows you to

access and change the customer programmable features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing

so can result in damage to the touchscreen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect 5.0N Buttons On The Touchscreen And

Buttons On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect

system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,

there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right

side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and

change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the

control knob one or more times to select or change a

setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and

Back buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the

Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the

faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a

Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect display.

Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings

Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the

menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system

allows you to access programmable features that may be

equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driv-

ing Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks,

Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped),

Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data.

NOTE:

• Only one category may be selected at a time.

• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any

changes are made.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the

setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button

on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to

return to the previous menu or press the X button on the

touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Press-

ing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on

the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or

down through the available settings.

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Display Mode

Press the display mode button to set the display bright-

ness according to day, night or auto condition. In auto

mode the display brightness is aligned to that of the

instrument panel.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

This feature allows you to select the display brightness

when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with

the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.

Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-

screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.

• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off

This feature allows you to select the display brightness

when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with

the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.

Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-

screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.

• Set Language

This feature allows you to select one of multiple lan-

guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip

functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press

the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the “Desired Language” button. The button will high-

light showing that setting has been selected. Press the

arrow back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to

the previous menu.

• Units

Press the Units button to select Temperature (°F or °C),

Distance (mi or km) and Fuel Consumption. If the

distance is in mi (miles), miles per gallon (mpg) are set

automatically. If the distance is km, km/1 or 1/100km

can be selected.

• Touchscreen Beep

This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound

heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. To

make your selection, press the “Touchscreen Beep” but-

ton on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The

button will highlight indicating that the setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Display Trip B

Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the dis-

playing of the Trip B on the instrument panel display.

• Voice Response Length

This feature allows you to change the Voice Response

Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,

press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen. The

button will highlight showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Units — If Equipped

Press the Units button to select “US”, “Metric” or “Cus-

tom”. If “Custom” is selected, each unit of measure may

be selected independently.

The correct unit for Temperature “°C,” or “°F,” Distance

“mi” or “km” and Fuel Consumption.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

If the distance is in “mi,” “MPG” (US) are set automati-

cally. If the distance is “km”, “km/L” or “L/100 km” can

be selected.

Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped With Naviga-

tion

This feature allows you to automatically have the radio

set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the

“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen. The

button will highlight showing that setting has been

selected.

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the

Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press

the “Show Time in Status Bar” button. The button will

highlight showing that setting has been selected.

• Time and Format

This feature will allow you to set the time and choose the

format to display the time. To make your selection, press

the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to

adjust the hours/minutes up or down. To select format

press the 12h/24h AM and/or PM button on the touch-

screen. The button will highlight showing that setting has

been selected. If 24h is selected, the AM/PM buttons on

the touchscreen will be greyed out (unavailable). Press

the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu or press the ”X” button on the

touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

• Set Date

This feature will allow you to set the date manually. Press

the Set Date button on the touchscreen and using the

“Up” and “Down” arrows, set the date.

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• ParkView Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see

straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up

camera display whenever the shift lever is put into

REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio

touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check

entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. When

the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear view

image will display for no more than ten seconds and after

the radio screen will appear.

To make your selection, press the ParkView Rear Back Up

Camera button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had

been selected.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView

Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for

up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).

Lights

After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,

press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-

screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-

cating that the setting has been selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto

Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or

“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-

ting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button

on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Audio

After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Balance

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance settings.

Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust,

or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the center.

• Equalizer

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble

settings. Adjust the settings with the “–” or “+” arrow

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the Up and Down arrow buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your

finger up or down to change the setting as well as press

directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen.

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Loudness — If Equipped

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To

make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will

highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Auto - On Radio

Press the Auto On Radio button on the touchscreen to set

how the radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to

On. The options are: ON, Off or Recall Last.

• AUX Volume Offset

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match

button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.

• Radio Off Delay

Press the Radio Off Delay to keep the radio On for a

preset amount of time after the Ignition is switched Off.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Tune Start

Tune Start begins playing the current song from the

beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of

the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.

This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected

during that current song. Tune Start works in the back-

ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that

you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song

with only a few seconds left to play. To make your

selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touch-

screen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip

followed by pressing the back arrow button on the

touchscreen.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings — If Equipped

After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”

select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings

are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to

default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.

UCONNECT RADIOS

iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the

instrument panel below the Climate Controls. This fea-

ture allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged

into the USB port.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod

and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may

not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit

Apple’s website for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supple-

ment Manual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

USB Input And AUX Jack

1 — USB Input 2 — AUX Audio Jack

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch

will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the

switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right hand control

will switch modes to Radio, AUX or other valid audio

sources.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center. The function of the left hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand control

will tune to the next pre-set station that you have

programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not

harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not

satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it

is recommended that the radio volume be turned down

or off during mobile phone operation when not using

Uconnect (if equipped).

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Climate Controls

The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary

dials, and three push buttons.

1. Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air

inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial

counter clockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates

cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red

area indicates warmer temperatures.

2. A/C Button

Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light

will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is

engaged.

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation

modes at the same time.

Manual Climate Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

ECONOMY MODE

If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn

OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,

move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

3. Recirculation Control

Push this control button to change the system between

recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation

can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,

odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp

weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,

because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-

lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for

Defrost. If the recirculation button is pressed in

Defrost mode, the recirculation LED will blink.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-

turbing the mode control selection.

4. Rear Defrost Control

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn

ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside

mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when

the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window

defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Mode Control

Rotate this control to change the system between Modes

(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the

instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-

justed to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed

so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers

for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor

outlets.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount flowing through the defrost and

side window demister outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and

side window demister outlets. This setting

works best in cold or snowy conditions that

require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is

good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-

ture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and

side window demister outlets. Use this mode

with maximum blower and temperature settings for

best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix

or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is

not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the

windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes

only when necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

6. Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced

through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower

speed increases as you move the control to the right from

the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.

Rear Window/Mirror Defrosting

Push, and release the rear window defrost button to turn

the function on/off.

The activation of the rear defroster is indicated by the

rear defrost indicator on the instrument panel. The func-

tion is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.

If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate

defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.

NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated

rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage

that might cause them to stop working properly.

Air Recirculation

Press and release the Air Recirculation button, LED

indicator On, to enter recirculation mode. It is recom-

mended to turn the internal air recirculation On while

standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduc-

tion of polluted air.

Do not use this function for an extended period of time,

particularly if there are many passengers on board, to

prevent the windows from misting up.

NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to

reach the required heating or cooling conditions more

quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the

internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it

would considerably increase the possibility of the win-

dows misting.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Distribution Selection

Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of

the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger

compartment:

Air flow to the front windshield, front side win-

dow and front/rear footwell diffusers.

Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This

air distribution allows the passenger compart-

ment to be heated quickly.

Air flow distributed between central and side

dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.

Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passen-

ger’s body).

Air flow to windshield and side windows.

Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield

distribution activates the climate control system com-

pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation

is set to ⬙outside air⬙ (LED on Recirculation Control

button off). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at

the windows. The user can always set air recirculation

and climate control system compressor.

System Maintenance

In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at

least once a month for about 10 minutes.

Have the system inspected at a Ram dealership before the

summer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS —

IF EQUIPPED

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-

ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and

tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0/5.0N

system.

Key Features:

• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display

• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control

• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your

voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

Uconnect 5.0/5.0N

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-

structions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-

versations are examples of noise that may impact

recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while

facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned

on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command

1 — Push to Mute

2 — Push To Begin Radio or Media functions.

3 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-

ceive A Text

4 — Push To End Call

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-

tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or

want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button

and say “Help.” The system will provide you with

a list of commands.

Uconnect 5.0/5.0N Radio

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any

point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice

recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-

screen.

Uconnect 5.0/5.0N

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and

auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only

available for connected USB and iPod devices.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to

switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to AUX

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all

of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice

Command must match exactly how the artist, album,

song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 5.0/5.0N Media

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy

with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-

nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and

pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button

. After the beep, say one of

the following commandsѧ

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the

Phone button

and say “Call,” then pronounce the

name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When

a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 5.0/5.0N Phone

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push

the Phone button

and say Listen. (Must have com-

patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the Phone button

. After the beep, say: “Reply”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system

prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.

No.

Start without

me.

I’ll be Late.

Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-

ber> minutes

late.

Call me.

Are you there

yet?

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

I’ll call you

later.

I need

directions.

See you in

<number> of

minutes.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

now.

I’m lost. Thanks.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-

tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-

tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-

ports reading incoming text messages only.

Additional Information

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a

trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,

Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered

trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7

days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

• Sun., Closed

Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please

have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................223

▫ Automatic Transmission ................223

▫ Normal Starting.......................223

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................224

▫ Extended Park Starting..................224

▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................225

▫ After Starting ........................225

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .225

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............226

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............228

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .228

▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........228

▫ Gear Ranges .........................230

䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........237

▫ Acceleration .........................237

▫ Traction ............................237

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............238

▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................238

▫ Shallow Standing Water .................238

䡵 POWER STEERING .....................239

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............240

䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................241

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................244

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .244

▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .244

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............246

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............246

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................247

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........248

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light ................249

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........252

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............253

▫ Tire Markings ........................253

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........257

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........258

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........260

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........265

▫ Tire Pressure ........................265

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................266

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .268

▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................268

▫ Tire Types ...........................269

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............270

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............271

220 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Tire Spinning ........................273

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................274

▫ Life Of Tire .........................275

▫ Replacement Tires .....................276

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......277

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....278

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS) ..............................279

▫ System Operation .....................281

▫ General Information ...................284

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................284

▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................284

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................285

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............285

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......286

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................286

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................286

▫ Fuel System Cautions...................287

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............288

䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................289

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................291

▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............291

䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................293

▫ Common Towing Definitions .............294

▫ Towing Tips .........................305

STARTING AND OPERATING 221

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................307

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .307

▫ Recreational Towing — Automatic

Transmission .........................308

222 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-

tor.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children). A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

Automatic Transmission

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes

before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting

out of PARK.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the

accelerator pedal.

Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)

position and release it when the engine starts. If the

engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition

switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 223

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low

temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking

when the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C)

and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an

engine block heater has not been used. The message

“plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster when the ambient temperature is below

-25°F (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a

reminder.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle

has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery

to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it

when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the

ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five

seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the

Extended Park Starting procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow

the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat

the procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-

tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10

to 15 seconds before trying again.

224 STARTING AND OPERATING

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle.

• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-

ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at

a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits

quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet

with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine

block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures

below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,

behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps

below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-

er’s side headlamp).

STARTING AND OPERATING 225

2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in

place.

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into

a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the

Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the

driver’s side headlamp.

NOTE:

• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed

option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords

are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.

• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and

6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.

• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least

one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the

engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

226 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.

Once the key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

•

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,

or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 227

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the full

LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be

removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full

LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission

is locked in PARK.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK

unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/

RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake

pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from

NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is

stopped or moving at low speeds.

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both

beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC). To select a gear range, push the

lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rear-

ward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to

shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from

NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is

stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/

Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section).

Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

228 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles or kilometers.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift

positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS

shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)

Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Mov-

ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the

DRIVE position) activates ERS mode and prevents auto-

matic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling

the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the

highest available gear.

NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,

REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-

ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the

DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear

limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]

position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING 229

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

Shift Lever

230 STARTING AND OPERATING

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the

gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.

Once the key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 231

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the gear selector/shift lever out of

PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and

also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to

the gear selector/shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you

have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the

shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way

forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever

will not move out of PARK.

232 STARTING AND OPERATING

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

STARTING AND OPERATING 233

while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range

Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further infor-

mation) to select a lower gear range. Under these condi-

tions, using a lower gear range will improve performance

and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-

ing and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the

transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,

and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch

engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-

age due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-

mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and

the transmission may operate differently until the trans-

mission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque

converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

Normal operation will resume once the transmission

temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is

selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

234 STARTING AND OPERATING

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized

dealer service is required.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

STARTING AND OPERATING 235

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until

the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles

(2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher

when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may

seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when

cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will

function normally once the transmission is sufficiently

warm.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the

driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if

you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the

transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift

through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any

vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE

position, the transmission will operate automatically,

shifting between all available gears.

Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside

DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear

in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top

available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever

forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available

gear and it will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the

DRIVE position.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum

deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into

the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward

236 STARTING AND OPERATING

(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which

the vehicle can best be slowed down.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-

pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull

erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs

when there is a difference in the surface traction under

the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the

front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle

and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or

complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To

reduce this possibility, the following precautions should

be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are

slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first

become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a

sudden stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 237

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water

is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-

ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface

and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions

and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping

distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-

ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the

brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-

sengers, and others around you.

238 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

standing water that is deeper than the bottom of

the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in

the way before driving through the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave

effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage

to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always

inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-

mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,

fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after

driving through standing water. Do not continue to

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-

nated, as this may result in further damage. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

STARTING AND OPERATING 239

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-

ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it

does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

240 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering

system as the chemicals can damage your power

steering components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an

automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission

in REVERSE or first gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as

possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up

slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever

completely.

STARTING AND OPERATING 241

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in

the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic

transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning

Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime

will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking

brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-

plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake

before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load

on the transmission locking mechanism may make it

difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied whenever the driver is

not in the vehicle.

Parking Brake

242 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-

mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-

VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the

vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

STARTING AND OPERATING 243

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake

systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses

normal capability, the remaining system will still func-

tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking

effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel

during application, greater pedal force required to slow

or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System

Warning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,

repeated brake applications with the engine off), the

brakes will still function. However, the effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic

brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-

trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic

Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to

enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving

conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in

maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-

ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to

modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up

and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to

provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor

makes a low humming noise during operation, which is

normal.

244 STARTING AND OPERATING

The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When

the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The

system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning

the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the

fault detected was only momentary.

WARNING!

• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their

effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping

makes the stopping distance longer. Just press

firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow

down or stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of

the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving the

use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as

the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the

system reverting to the base brake system.

Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a

pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.

These occurrences are normal and indicate that the

system is functioning properly.

STARTING AND OPERATING 245

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-

ing road conditions.

• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount

of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin

is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping

246 STARTING AND OPERATING

wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide en-

hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS

system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-

lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel

spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is

spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the

brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine

torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in

the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC)” in this section for further information.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when

starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain

the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short

period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake

pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this

short period of time, the system will release brake

pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The

system will release brake pressure in proportion to the

amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in

the intended direction of travel.

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.

• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,

vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle

facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill

is in REVERSE gear).

STARTING AND OPERATING 247

WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded

vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system

will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This

could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.

Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-

ing the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-

tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the

vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in

the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the

driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the intended path,

ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist

in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all

accidents, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions

(Continued)

248 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-

mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR

(ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on

continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has

been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on

after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been

driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than

STARTING AND OPERATING 249

30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as

possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located

in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the

tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also

flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-

eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and

the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily

each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially

off.

ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has two available operating modes.

Full On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever

the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This

mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC

should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons

as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-

tion.

250 STARTING AND OPERATING

Partial Off

The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank

above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”

mode, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-

minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the

“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal

“ESC On” mode of operation.

ESC Off Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 251

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,

sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the

“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC

OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”

mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily

pushing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while

the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in

the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-

tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is

disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered

by the ESC system is reduced.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring

during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot

prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road

conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or

other vehicles.

252 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize

the user’s safety or the safety of others.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING 253

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

254 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 255

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL = Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure –

Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

256 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

STARTING AND OPERATING 257

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

258 STARTING AND OPERATING

Term Definition

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 259

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

260 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

STARTING AND OPERATING 261

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-

tion of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

262 STARTING AND OPERATING

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will

be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [294 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

STARTING AND OPERATING 263

264 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 265

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side

door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

266 STARTING AND OPERATING

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

STARTING AND OPERATING 267

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).

268 STARTING AND OPERATING

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 269

WARNING! (Continued)

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the origi-

nal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

270 STARTING AND OPERATING

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle

of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended

tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You

can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare

by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side

door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare

tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding

the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 271

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original

equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 273

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

Tire Tread

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the

tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

STARTING AND OPERATING 275

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

(Continued)

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices

are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are

used.

STARTING AND OPERATING 277

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”

shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern

does not apply to some directional tires that must not be

reversed.

Tire Rotation

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold tire pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1

psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when

the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a

three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must

not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into

the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”

in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and

there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-

sure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or

natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire

pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to

the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system

will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives

the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be

STARTING AND OPERATING 279

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of

30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)

and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a

temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle

may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27

psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires

are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-

sure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warnings have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-

eration or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have

your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

(Continued)

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

System Operation

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the

instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-

els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver

Module.

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module.

• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. (If Equipped

with Spare Tire)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be

activated, and a proper text message will be displayed

when one or more of the four active road tire pressures

are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as

possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your

vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-

mended cold placard pressure value. The system will

automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures

have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven

for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive

this information.

Check TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system

fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and

a proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition

key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the

system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no

longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the

following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPM sensors.

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire

Service Kit, compact spare tire or regular size spare tire

(with or without original TPMS sensor).

1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped):

After fixing the punctured tire with original tire seal-

ant, the original situation will be restored, so system

will turn off the telltale during the normal drive.

2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The compact spare

wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when

mounted, during the normal drive the system will

turn on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec.

then remains solid). This condition persists until a

wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has been

mounted on the vehicle.

3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS

sensor): When mounted, during the normal drive the

system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approxi-

mately 75 sec. then remains solid). This condition

persists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS

sensor has been mounted on the vehicle. Then the

system will be restored and the telltale will turn off

during the normal drive.

4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor):

When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the

normal drive.

5. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire

inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for

short periods of time, then the system can take a while

to be restored.

NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,

please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each

tire substitution.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.4L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emis-

sions regulations and provide optimum

fuel economy and performance when us-

ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-

line having a posted octane number of 87

as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher

octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not

provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these

engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

284 STARTING AND OPERATING

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-

proved performance and durability of engine and fuel

system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,

and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to

illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater

than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol

STARTING AND OPERATING 285

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may

void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-

tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in

minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-

able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-

mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

•

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-

mance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

CAUTION! (Continued)

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

(Continued)

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the

left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,

be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

1. Open the fuel filler door.

2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.

3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.

4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the

fuel tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close

fuel filler door.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let

impurities into the fuel system and may cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,

due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is

being filled.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-

tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank

is full.

• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”

sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is

properly tightened.

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may

come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time

the vehicle is refueled.

VEHICLE LOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.

If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the

specified GVWR and GAWR.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to

the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total

load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is

important that you do not exceed the maximum front

or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can

result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,

wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory

service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the

front and rear GAWR.

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for

operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that

it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle

separately. It is important that you distribute the load

evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and

shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension

components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s

GVWR.

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty

weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items

down low and be sure you distribute their weight as

evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before

driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you

have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within

the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed

to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR

and GAWRs.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow the requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and

ready for operation⬙ condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-

tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight

is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional

hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your

vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping

link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and

the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-

tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen

any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies

individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to

attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds

of hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized

trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used

in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-

vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle

and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking

performance, and could result in a collision.

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-

ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your

hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-

reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer

Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings)

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-

mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website

addresses:

• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/

• ramtruck.ca (Canada)

• rambodybuilder.com

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side

which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.

Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of

many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your bumper or trailer hitch.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must

be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for

the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo

for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain

components, the following guidelines are recommended.

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps

the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance

Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the

proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,

never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When trailering

cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts

can occur that may be difficult for the driver to

control. You could lose control of your vehicle and

have a collision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough

slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in

PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure

the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,

block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

(Continued)

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-

lized.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the

proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a

higher load carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have

brakes when you need them and could have a

collision.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a

collision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-

pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-

ness and connector.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Trailer Electrical Connector Location

1 — Four-Pin Connector Location

2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground

2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps

4 — Electric Brakes

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,

and backing up the trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid

frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent

shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic

Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear

range.

NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the

vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve

performance and extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

Electronic Range Select (ERS)

• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest

gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids

frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the

desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if

needed to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous

driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-

sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to

a higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and

road conditions allow.

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission

into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow Front OK

Rear NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always

follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state

and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional

details.

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels

are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a

tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow

this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-

sion in PARK.

4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the

drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-

ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the

ground.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered un-

der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........311

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............311

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ......................312

▫ Torque Specifications ...................313

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........314

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped ......315

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage ..................315

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................319

▫ Jack Location.........................320

▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................320

▫ Preparations For Jacking ................324

▫ Jacking Instructions ....................325

▫ Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers.......334

䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........335

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............336

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................337

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............339

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........341

䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............343

䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .......344

310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the

instrument panel above the climate controls.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission

in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle

speed while preventing vehicle motion with the

brakes.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT

(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous

chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt Socket

Size

63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)

Steel Wheels Only

89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)

Aluminum Wheels

Only

M12 x 1.25 17 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before

tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Wheel Mounting Surface

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be

sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws

or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service

Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-

mately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you

to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a

maximum speed of 65 mph (106 km/h).

Torque Patterns

314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped

The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.

Tire Service Kit Usage

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency

repair using the Tire Service Kit located under the

passenger seat.

Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6 mm) can be repaired; the

kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove

the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or

nail.

Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out

from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw

the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle

2 — Pressure Gauge

3 — Power Plug (located behind storage door)

4 — Power Button

5 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when using

the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in

the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,

swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-

ately with plenty of water if there is any contact

with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as

possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)

316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-

sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-

diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of

water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet

socket. Start the vehicle engine.

Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.

The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air

will inflate the tire.

Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached

within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached

turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle

30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the

sealant inside the tire.

Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor

directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.

When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving

the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the

tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If

the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the

vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest

Authorized Dealer.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after

using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph

(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317

WARNING! (Continued)

Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries

that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and

others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as

possible at an Authorized Dealer.

If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the

inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and

continue driving.

Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on

the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has

been treated with Tire Service Kit.

WARNING!

The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot

after use, so it should be handled carefully.

NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-

tion date at your Authorized Dealer.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,

away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this

WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture

and serious injury or death.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319

Jack Location

The jack and tools are stowed under the drivers front seat

or in the storage compartment (if equipped).

Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the

vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch exten-

sion.

Jack/Tools Location

Jack/Tools Location (Storage Compartment)

320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of

the vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access

cover. Remove the access cover and install the winch

extension into the winch mechanism.

Jack Tools

1 — Wrench Handle

2 — Winch Extension

3 — Emergency Screwdriver

4 — Bolt Install Wrench

5 — Wheel Chock

6 — Jack

Winch Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321

3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise

until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable

slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other

power tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain

access to the spare tire retainer.

Jack Tools

1 — Winch Extension

2 — Wrench Handle

Spare Tire

322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer

from the wheel.

6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to

tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Retainer Nut Lifting Spare Tire

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323

7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery

areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK.

5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-

ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain

in the vehicle when the vehicle is

being jacked.

Retainer

324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with

the wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn

while the wheel is still on the ground.

2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side

of the vehicle body.

Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations

326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Place the jack underneath the jack engagement

location that is closest to the flat tire.

Jack Engaged To Body Flange

Front Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated.

WARNING!

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never get any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the

jack head is properly engaged in the described loca-

tion. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the

jack is securely engaged.

Rear Jacking Location

328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right

until the tire just clears the surface and enough clear-

ance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire

lift provides maximum stability.

Front Jacking Location Engaged Rear Jacking Location Engaged

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel

covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not

pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.

6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug

bolts using the bolt install wrench.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem

facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the

spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Mounting Spare Tire

330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury.

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for

proper wheel lug bolt torque.

9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

10. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the

vehicle.

NOTE: For vehicles with alloy wheels remove the

adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag in the

glove compartment. Take the adapter and fit the plastic

spacer between the spring and the flange of the bracket

(The adapter bracket is sold separately through the

dealer). The plastic fin must be directed downwards and

perfectly coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket

in the adapter, fold the bracket up and secure it to the

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331

adapter with the fastening knob. Position the tire verti-

cally and lay the mounted adapter on the inner part of

the rim, using the supplied bolts fasten the wheel to the

adapter using the bolt install wrench. Tighten the bolts

with the wrench handle. Rotate the winch mechanism

clockwise until the wheel is properly stowed under the

vehicle and until the wench makes three audible noises.

Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to confirm that

it is secure. The tire should not move. If tire is still loose

and/or three audible noises are not heard, place and

secure damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek dealer

assistance for the wench mechanism. This is for tempo-

rary use only.

Adapter/Spacer

1 — Adapter

2 — Plastic Spacer

332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

11. Stow the jack and tools under the drivers seat.

12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.

Correct the tire pressure, as required.

Adapter/Bracket

1 — Adapter

2 — Fastening Knob

Alloy Wheel Mounting

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with

wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel.

Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the

bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the

valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover

2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel

3 — Wheel Bolt

334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not

use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded

end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly

tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while holding at the end of the handle for

increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star

pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.

Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for

correct wheel bolt torque.

7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque

with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are

properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a

protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the

positive battery post.

Positive Battery Post

336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear

selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and

REVERSE , while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the

least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will

maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the

wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be

achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.

Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for

more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to

engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to

transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-

gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at

least one minute after every five rocking-motion

cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce

the risk of transmission failure during prolonged

efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,

before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control System” in “Starting And Operating”. Once the

vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to

restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the

wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

(Continued)

340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground ALL MODELS

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED

Front OK

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding

vehicles under tow must be observed.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position.

If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery

is discharged, refer to “GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE”

in this section for instructions on shifting the transmis-

sion out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with

all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be

towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a

towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front

wheels raised).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec-

tor:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate

the gear selector boot from the center console.

4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into the

gear selector override access hole (at the right front

corner of the gear selector assembly) then push and

hold the override release lever down. While still

holding down the override release lever, move the

Gear Selector Boot Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343

gear selector to the NEUTRAL position (the shift knob

button must be pushed normally to move the lever).

6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

7. Reinstall the gear selector boot.

IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,

proceed as follows:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake

2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in

the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the

cargo box.

3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping

control handle down.

4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of

the travel position, then lock the steering column in

position, push the control handle up until fully en-

gaged.

Gear Selector Override Access Hole

344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column

cover screws, and remove the lower cover.

6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and

with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.

7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column

cover.

Lower Steering Column Screw Locations

Release Tab Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345

CAUTION!

It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to

have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would

like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure

special attention must be paid to the correct coupling

of the clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise

might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the

lower cover.

346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........349

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .350

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity ........................350

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............351

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS ..........................352

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................353

䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................353

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........354

▫ Engine Oil ..........................355

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................358

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................358

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............359

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............360

▫ Body Lubrication .....................361

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............362

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................363

▫ Exhaust System ......................364

▫ Cooling System ......................366

▫ Brake System ........................372

▫ Power Steering Fluid ...................374

▫ Automatic Transmission ................375

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion ...........................377

䡵 FUSES ..............................383

▫ Underhood Fuses......................384

▫ Interior Fuses ........................387

▫ Central Unit Fuse Panel .................390

䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................391

䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................392

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................393

▫ Headlamps ..........................393

▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps ................394

▫ Parking And Daytime Running Lights .......394

▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............394

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal

Lamps .............................395

▫ Third Brake Light (Center Mount) ..........395

▫ License Plate Lights ....................396

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................396

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS ..............................397

▫ Engine .............................397

▫ Chassis ............................399

348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic

system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and

service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-

nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in

order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior

tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or a

loss of vehicle control could occur that may result

in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information

stored in your vehicle systems, including per-

sonal information.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s

Manual on the DVD.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.

This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-

ened.

Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If

the problem persists, the message will appear the next

time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351

cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system

will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the

MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you place the ignition in the off

position or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed

to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

(Continued)

354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.

There are three possible dipstick types,

• Crosshatched zone.

• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.

• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of

the range and MAX at the high end of the range.

NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the cross-

hatch markings on the dipstick.

Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the

low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the

high end of the range marking.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage

your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-

20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-

gine oils.

356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine

MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or

equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine

oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-

able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The

quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only

high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil

filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”

maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

(Continued)

358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealer or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

— If Equipped

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-

fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a

low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the

manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service

be performed by authorized dealer or other service

facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions

are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-

sary.

Wiper Service Position

If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In

the event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as

directed:

362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF

position.

2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to

STOP.

3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two

minutes move the right stalk upward, into the un-

stable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a

second. The windshield wiper then executes part of a

stroke; at each command, approximately 1/3 of a

normal wiper stroke is triggered.

NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to

three times. In order to move the blades to the most

suitable position.

4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with

the required operation.

5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact

with the windshield.

6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the

ignition to MAR-ON.

NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades

lifted from the windshield.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine

compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the

reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with

windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and

operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the

residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe

clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

•

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer

to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

(Continued)

364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the

system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with

fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an

authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser

366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by

gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically

down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at

the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the

entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-

freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE

CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead

to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains

visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and

flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the engine coolant and may

plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-

lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-

terial Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-

tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized

dealer for assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper

level of protection against freezing according to the

temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is

operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system, please contact your

local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as

possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

The image on the coolant system pres-

sure cap is a reminder that the radiator

contains hot engine coolant under

pressure.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool

an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding

or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the

system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek

emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground

spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual

method for determining that the coolant level is ad-

equate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the

engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-

tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap

unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze

point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets

the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032

should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant

expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-

ing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion

protection of your engine which contains aluminum

components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-

sions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

(Continued)

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when

performing under hood services or immediately if the

“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be

expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level

should be checked when pads are replaced. However,

low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup

may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has

been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373

WARNING! (Continued)

cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the

air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-

longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be

damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Power Steering Fluid

Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and

engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX

references on the reservoir body.

The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot.

If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is

approved. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Parts” in the section for further information.

WARNING!

Because it is flammable, do not allow the power

steering fluid to come into contact with hot engine

parts

NOTE: Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If

you need to top off your fluid often and multiple times

have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this

section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain

the transmission fluid at the correct level using the

recommended fluid.

NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-

mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the

transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they

may adversely affect seals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can

check your transmission fluid level using special service

tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-

tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have

the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-

hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe

transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-

ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes

contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is

disassembled for any reason.

376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint

and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly

with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-

ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain

this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-

tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton

based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as

damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog

lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-

age than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the

vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-

propriate replacement fuse with the same amp

rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never

replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other

material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in

serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-

age.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383

Underhood Fuses

The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of

the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the

fuses, remove fasteners and remove the cover.

The ID number of the electrical component correspond-

ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.

Front Distribution Unit

384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller

F02 40 Amp Orange – Front Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP

Outlet

F02 60 Amp Blue – Rear Power Window Including Front

Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP Outlet

F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch

F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module

F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed

F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed

F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor

F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn

F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM

F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam

F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter

F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay

F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning

F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster

F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock

F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads

F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System

F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering

Angle Sensor

F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamp

F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump

F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module

F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet 12V

F86 – 30 Amp Green IP Power Outlet 12V

F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS

F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost

386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Fuses

The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control

Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under

the instrument panel.

Fuse Panel Cover

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387

Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC

F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking

F36 10 Amp Red KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio

F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump

F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows

F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag

F51 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment

Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils

F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.),

IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)

F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, ECM

Backlighting, TTM

F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO

F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389

Central Unit Fuse Panel

The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s

side under the instrument panel.

Fuse Panel Cover

Fuse Panel

390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver

F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger

F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side

F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side

F5 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet 12V

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21

days, you may want to take these steps to protect your

battery.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Front Courtesy Lamps C10W

Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W

Luggage Lamp C5W

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Front Low Beam Headlamp H11

Front High Beam Headlamps HB3

Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)

Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W

Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W

Rear Stop Lamp P21W

Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W

392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Bulb Number

Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W

Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)

Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W

Reverse Light W16W

Front Fog Lamps H11

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

Headlamps

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp

housing.

2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.

3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393

4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.

5. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front Turn Signal Lamps

Front

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper

headlamp housing.

2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.

3. Install the bulb into socket.

4. Rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in

place.

5. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Parking And Daytime Running Lights

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower

headlamp housing.

2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.

3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket

clockwise into lamp locking it in place.

4. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not

serviced separately. See your authorized dealer for re-

placement of these lights.

394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps

The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light,

direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To

access the light clusters, proceed as follows:

1. Open the rear doors. or liftgate

2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assem-

bly.

3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from

the lamp housing.

4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing

them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.

5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.

6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.

The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows:

Third Brake Light (Center Mount)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening

screws and extract the cluster.

2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs ,

remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.

3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove

the pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a

screwdriver, release the retaining tags as shown in the

figure and remove the unit.

4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb

holder.

5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395

License Plate Lights

Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:

1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by

lifting to the left.

2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side

contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are

correctly clamped between these contacts.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API

Certified)

5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Cooling System*

2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR

Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of

FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified

Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell

Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE

grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or

equivalent.

Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your

transmission.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4.

Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard

MS-11655.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..............402

▫ Maintenance Chart.....................404

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions

such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine

idle time, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures

will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message

is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the

change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles

(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as

soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”

in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine

run time or twelve months, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle

is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe

Duty.

402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,

even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns

on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and

brake master cylinder, fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following

page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-

lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator

system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses,

lines and park brake

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and

hoses

• Inspect exhaust system

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or

off-road conditions

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403

Maintenance Chart

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,

and replace if necessary.

XXX X X X X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X

Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler

pulley, and replace if necessary.

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter. * X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X

404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Change brake fluid every two years. X X X X X X X

Replace spark plugs. ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes

first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

* Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

if operated in dusty and off road environment.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,

yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

(Continued)

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405

WARNING! (Continued)

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE .......................409

▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............409

▫ Prepare A List ........................409

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............409

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............409

▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........410

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........410

▫ In Mexico Contact .....................411

▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........411

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...................411

▫ Service Contract ......................411

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............413

䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................413

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............413

▫ In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.......................413

▫ In Canada ...........................413

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............414

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................415

▫ Treadwear...........................415

▫ Traction Grades .......................416

▫ Temperature Grades....................416

408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA USA LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (866) 726-4636

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),

or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,

and/or components is written in straightforward lan-

guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included

414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety

tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal

safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

(Continued)

416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING! (Continued)

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417

INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............368

Additives, Fuel ...........................286

AirBag.................................47

Advance Front Air Bag ....................49

Air Bag Operation .......................50

Air Bag Warning Light ....................58

Driver Knee Air Bag ......................51

Enhanced Accident Response ................57

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................60

FrontAirBag...........................47

If A Deployment Occurs ...................56

Knee Impact Bolsters .....................51

Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............59

Transporting Pets ........................85

Air Bag Deployment ........................47

Air Bag Light .......................58, 88, 154

Air Bag Maintenance .......................59

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .358

Air Conditioner Maintenance .................360

Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............360, 361

Air Conditioning System ....................360

Air Filter ...............................358

Air Pressure, Tires.........................266

Air Recirculation..........................208

Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................16

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................16

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............367, 396

Disposal ..............................370

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................244

Appearance Care .........................377

Ashtray ................................134

Audio Systems (Radio) .....................201

Auto Down Power Windows ..................27

Automatic Transaxle.....................12, 223

Automatic Transmission ..............226, 228, 376

Adding Fluid .......................376, 399

Fluid And Filter Changes ..................376

420 INDEX

Fluid Change ..........................376

Fluid Level Check ...................375, 376

Fluid Type .........................375, 399

Special Additives .......................375

Auto Up Power Windows ....................27

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........130

Axle Lubrication ..........................399

Battery .............................156, 359

Charging System Light ...................156

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........19

Belts, Seat ...............................88

Body Builders Guide ........................6

Body Mechanism Lubrication .................361

B-Pillar Location ..........................260

Brake Assist System .......................246

Brake Fluid .............................399

Brake, Parking ...........................241

Brake System .........................244, 372

Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................244

Fluid Check ........................373, 399

Master Cylinder ........................373

Parking ..............................241

Warning Light .........................159

Brake/Transmission Interlock.................228

Bulb Replacement......................392, 393

Bulbs, Light...........................90, 392

Camera, Rear ............................128

Capacities, Fluid ..........................396

Caps, Filler

Fuel .................................289

Oil (Engine) ........................349, 357

Power Steering .........................240

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................370

Carbon Monoxide Warning ................87, 288

Cargo Tie-Downs .........................136

Car Washes .............................377

INDEX 421

Cellular Phone ...........................204

Certification Label.........................291

Chains, Tire .............................277

Chart, Tire Sizing .........................255

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .352

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............86

Checks, Safety ............................86

Child Restraint ............................61

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ...........................66

Child Restraints .........................61

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........75

Infants And Child Restraints ................64

Older Children And Child Restraints ..........64

Cigar Lighter ............................134

Clean Air Gasoline ........................285

Cleaning

Wheels ...............................379

Climate Control ..........................205

Manual ..............................205

Cold Weather Operation ....................224

Compact Spare Tire ........................271

Contract, Service ..........................411

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........370

Cooling System...........................366

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............368

Coolant Capacity .......................396

Coolant Level ..........................371

Disposal Of Used Coolant .................370

Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................367

Inspection .........................366, 371

Points To Remember .....................371

Pressure Cap ..........................370

Radiator Cap ..........................370

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......367, 396, 397

Corrosion Protection .......................377

Cruise Light .............................175

Cupholders .............................134

422 INDEX

Customer Assistance .......................409

Customer Programmable Features .............191

Data Recorder, Event .......................60

Daytime Running Lights ....................111

Dealer Service............................353

Defroster, Rear Window.....................140

Defroster, Windshield ....................88, 207

Diagnostic System, Onboard .................350

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) ...........................355

Power Steering .........................240

Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................341

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................370

Door Ajar...............................157

Door Ajar Light ..........................157

Door Locks ..............................21

Doors ..................................21

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water ................................238

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........130

Electric Rear Window Defrost.................140

Electric Remote Mirrors......................96

Electronic Brake Control System ...............244

Brake Assist System .....................246

Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................236

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............252

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........119

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............248

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........152

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Exit Trip ..............................187

NewTrip.............................187

Start Of Trip Procedure ...................187

Trip Computer .........................187

INDEX 423

Trip Functions .........................188

Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................339

Jump Starting ..........................335

Towing ..............................341

Emission Control System Maintenance ..........352

Engine .................................349

Air Cleaner ...........................358

Block Heater ..........................225

Break-In Recommendations .................85

Checking Oil Level ......................355

Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................397

Cooling ..............................366

Exhaust Gas Caution ..................87, 288

Fails To Start ..........................225

Flooded, Starting .......................225

Fuel Requirements ......................284

Jump Starting ..........................335

Oil...........................355, 396, 397

Oil Filler Cap .......................349, 357

Oil Filter .............................358

Oil Selection .......................356, 396

Oil Synthetic ..........................357

Overheating ...........................311

Starting ..............................223

Engine Oil Viscosity .......................357

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................357

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............57

Ethanol ................................285

Event Data Recorder ........................60

Exhaust Gas Caution ....................87, 288

Exhaust System ........................87, 364

Exterior Lights ............................90

Filters

Air Cleaner ...........................358

Engine Oil .........................358, 397

Engine Oil Disposal .....................358

424 INDEX

Flashers

Hazard Warning ........................311

Turn Signal .........................90, 173

Flash-To-Pass ............................112

Flooded Engine Starting ....................225

Fluid, Brake .............................399

Fluid Capacities ..........................396

Fluid Leaks ..............................90

Fluid Level Checks

Brake ................................373

Engine Oil ............................355

Power Steering .........................240

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........397

Fog Lights ...........................113,170

Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................311

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................339

Fuel...................................284

Additives .............................286

Clean Air .............................285

Ethanol ..............................285

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................289

Gasoline ..............................284

Light ................................162

Materials Added ........................286

Methanol .............................285

Octane Rating ......................284, 397

Requirements ..........................284

Specifications ..........................397

Tank Capacity ..........................396

Fuses ..................................383

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................289, 351

Gasoline, Clean Air ........................285

Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................284

Gasoline, Reformulated .....................285

Gear Ranges .............................230

Gear Select Lever Override ..................343

General Information ....................204, 284

INDEX 425

Glass Cleaning ...........................382

Gross Axle Weight Rating ................291, 294

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............291, 294

Guide, Body Builders ........................6

GVWR .................................291

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water .........................238

Hazard Warning Flasher ....................311

Headlights ..............................111

Cleaning .............................381

Passing ..............................112

Head Restraints ..........................103

Heated Mirrors ...........................140

Heated Seats.............................102

Heater, Engine Block .......................225

Hill Start Assist...........................247

Hitches

Trailer Towing .........................297

Holder, Cup .............................134

Hood Release ............................108

Ignition .................................12

Key..................................12

Ignition Key Removal .......................12

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................14

Inside Rearview Mirror ......................94

Instrument Cluster..................147, 150, 173

Instrument Panel And Controls ...............146

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............382

Interior Appearance Care....................380

Introduction ..............................4

iPod Control.............................201

iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................201

Bluetooth Streaming Audio ................201

426 INDEX

Jump Starting ............................335

Key-In Reminder ..........................14

Key, Replacement ..........................15

Keys ...................................12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................14

Lane Change Assist ........................112

Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................36

Latches .................................90

Lead Free Gasoline ........................284

Leaks, Fluid ..............................90

Life Of Tires .............................275

Light Bulbs ...........................90, 392

Lights ............................90, 110, 111

AirBag .........................58, 88, 154

Brake Assist Warning ....................249

Brake Warning .........................159

Bulb Replacement .......................393

Cruise ...............................175

Engine Temperature Warning ...............150

Exterior ...............................90

Fog .................................170

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................311

Low Fuel .............................162

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........168

Park .............................112,174

Passing ..............................112

Seat Belt Reminder ......................153

Service ...............................393

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............164

Traction Control ........................249

Turn Signal .........................90, 173

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .150, 173

Loading Vehicle .......................291, 293

Capacities ............................293

Tires ................................260

Locks ..................................21

INDEX 427

Door .................................21

Lubrication, Body .........................361

Lug Nuts ...............................312

Maintenance Free Battery....................359

Maintenance Procedures ....................354

Maintenance Schedule ......................402

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .168, 352

Manual, Service ..........................414

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................373

Methanol ...............................285

Mirrors .................................94

Electric Powered .........................96

Electric Remote .........................96

Exterior Folding .........................95

Outside ...............................94

Rearview ..............................94

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................279

MOPAR Parts.........................353, 413

MTBE/ETBE ............................285

Multi-Function Control Lever .................111

New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................85

Occupant Restraints ........................32

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............284, 397

Oil Change Indicator .......................186

Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................186

Oil, Engine ..........................355, 397

Capacity .............................396

Change Interval ........................356

Checking .............................355

Dipstick ..............................355

Disposal ..............................358

Filter .............................358, 397

Filter Disposal .........................358

Identification Logo ......................356

428 INDEX

Materials Added To ......................357

Pressure Warning Light ...................155

Recommendation ....................356, 396

Synthetic .............................357

Viscosity ..........................357, 396

Oil Filter, Change .........................358

Oil Filter, Selection ........................358

Oil Pressure Light .........................155

Onboard Diagnostic System ..................350

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4

Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................94

Overheating, Engine .......................311

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,414

Paint Care ..............................377

Parking Brake............................241

ParkSense System, Rear .....................123

Passing Light ............................112

Personal Settings..........................191

Pets....................................85

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........261

Power

Mirrors ...............................96

Steering ...........................239, 240

Windows ..............................26

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............43

Preparation For Jacking .....................324

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ..............................43

Radial Ply Tires ..........................268

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........370

Radio Frequency

General Information ...................16, 20

Radio Operation ..........................204

Rear Camera ............................128

Rear ParkSense System .....................123

Rear Window Defroster .....................208

INDEX 429

Recorder, Event Data .......................60

Recreational Towing .......................307

Reformulated Gasoline .....................285

Refrigerant ..............................361

Reminder, Seat Belt.........................34

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........202

Replacement Bulbs ........................392

Replacement Keys .........................15

Replacement Parts.........................353

Replacement Tires .........................276

Reporting Safety Defects ....................413

Restraint, Head...........................103

Restraints, Child...........................61

Restraints, Occupant ........................32

Rotation, Tires ...........................278

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................88

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................90

Safety Defects, Reporting ....................413

Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................87

Safety Information, Tire .....................253

Safety Tips ...............................86

Schedule, Maintenance .....................402

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......41

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........44

Energy Management Feature ................44

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................38

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................36

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............40

Pregnant Women ........................43

Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................43

Seat Belt Reminder .......................34

Seat Belt System .........................32

Seat Belt Maintenance ......................382

Seat Belt Reminder .........................34

Seat Belts .............................34, 88

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................41

430 INDEX

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........41

Child Restraint ..........................61

Front Seat ........................34, 36, 38

Inspection .............................88

Operating Instructions ....................38

Pregnant Women ........................43

Pretensioners ...........................43

Rear Seat ..............................36

Reminder .............................153

Untwisting Procedure .....................40

Seats ...................................98

Adjustment ............................98

Heated ...............................102

Security Alarm ............................16

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............397

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................14

Service Assistance .........................409

Service Contract ..........................411

Service Manuals ..........................414

Shifting

Automatic Transmission ..................228

Shift Lever Override .......................343

Shoulder Belts ............................36

Signals, Turn ..........................90, 173

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................277

Snow Tires ..............................270

Spare Tire ...........................271, 272

Spark Plugs .............................397

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) .........................397

Oil..................................397

Speed Control

Accel/Decel ...........................122

Speed Control (Cruise Control)................119

Starting ................................223

Automatic Transmission ..................223

Cold Weather ..........................224

Engine Fails To Start .....................225

INDEX 431

Steering

Power ............................239, 240

Tilt Column ...........................118

Wheel, Tilt ............................118

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............202

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .202

Storage ................................391

Storage, Vehicle...........................391

Storing Your Vehicle .......................391

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........47

Synthetic Engine Oil .......................357

Telescoping Steering Column .................118

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................136

Tilt Steering Column .......................118

Tire And Loading Information Placard .......260, 261

Tire Markings ............................253

Tires.........................90, 265, 271, 415

Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................275

Air Pressure ...........................265

Chains ...............................277

Compact Spare .........................271

General Information ..................265, 271

High Speed ...........................268

Inflation Pressures .......................266

Life Of Tires ...........................275

Load Capacity ......................260, 262

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............279

Pressure Warning Light ...................164

Quality Grading ........................415

Radial ...............................268

Replacement ...........................276

Rotation ..............................278

Safety ............................253, 265

Sizes ................................255

Snow Tires ............................270

Spare Tire .........................271, 272

Spinning .............................273

432 INDEX

Trailer Towing .........................301

Tread Wear Indicators ....................274

Tire Safety Information .....................253

Tire Service Kit ...........................314

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................298

Towing ................................293

Disabled Vehicle ........................341

Guide ...............................298

Recreational ...........................307

Weight ...............................298

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........307

Traction ................................237

Traction Control ..........................246

Trailer Towing ...........................293

Cooling System Tips .....................306

Hitches ..............................297

Minimum Requirements ..................299

Tips.................................305

Trailer And Tongue Weight ................298

Wiring ...............................302

Trailer Towing Guide.......................298

Trailer Weight............................298

Transaxle

Automatic ..........................12, 223

Transmission ............................228

Automatic ......................226, 228, 375

Maintenance ...........................375

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19

Transporting Pets ..........................85

Tread Wear Indicators ......................274

Turn Signals .............................173

Uconnect Voice Command ...................210

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................415

Unleaded Gasoline ........................284

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................40

Vehicle Certification Label ...................291

INDEX 433

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6

Vehicle Loading ....................262, 291, 293

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7

Vehicle Storage ...........................391

Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................357

Voice Recognition System (VR) ................210

Warnings And Cautions ......................6

Warranty Information ......................413

Washers, Windshield....................114,363

Washing Vehicle ..........................377

Water

Driving Through ........................238

Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................379

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................379

Wind Buffeting............................28

Windows ................................26

Power ................................26

Windshield Defroster ....................88, 207

Windshield Washers ....................114,363

Fluid ................................363

Windshield Wiper Blades....................362

Windshield Wipers ........................114

Wiper Blade Replacement ...................362

Wrecker Towing ..........................341

434 INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

16DD43-126-AA

16VM-126-AB

SECOND EDITION REV. 1

2016 RAM ProMaster City

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

RAM 2016 RAM PROMASTER CITY Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor 6LED-18 Overland Truck Bed Rack LED fit Ram 1500/Canyon/Silverado 1500/Tundra

Vevor KA17-RM-BC001 5.7 ft Retractable Tonneau Cover Hard Tonneau Cover for Dodge Ram 1500

Vevor DQ9036C1 Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set for Dodge Jeep Ram Chrysler Performance and Reliability

DK2 84319 Custom Mount Kit Dodge Ram 2500 2020

DK2 84318 Custom Mount Kit Dodge Ram 1500 Rebel 2019

DK2 84317 Custom Mount Kit Dodge Power Wagon '14-'15, Dodge Ram 2500-3500 '14-'19